JP7344135B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, a technique has been proposed in which a vibrating means is provided in a ball firing handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-38019

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the performance using vibrations.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the game's interest when performing effects using vibrations.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A production control means capable of executing production;
Predetermined effect execution means for performing variable display again after executing the predetermined effect after the start of variable display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is to be executed;
comprising a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify that the predetermined effect has been executed,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in either a first light emission mode in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is low, and a second light emission mode in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is high, unlike the first light emission mode. and
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A specific performance can be executed after starting the reach performance,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined vibration production that vibrates,
It is possible to execute a special vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
At the first timing , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed according to a light emission mode of the light emission means ,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a performance movable body different from the operation means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different vibration modes,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different vibration modes,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state), including an operating means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. , a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 according to the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern). Executable vibration performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203, etc.) ), and a light emitting effect execution means (for example, light emission effect of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 according to the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern) that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. A production control CPU 120 that executes the variable display production process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part production control pattern determined in step AKS203) and a specific production (for example, SP reach) according to the progress of the game. A specific performance execution means that can execute the reach performance of A, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc. (for example, executes the variable display performance processing in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) performance control CPU 120, etc.), and when the predetermined vibration performance is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, when the predetermined vibration performance is not performed). jackpot reliability according to the pattern, etc.), and the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed ( (For example, the emitting color included in the operation part performance pattern and the jackpot reliability depending on the application of the operation part performance pattern, etc.), the vibration performance execution means can execute the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance ( For example, the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 is different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
moreover,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing the performance (performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to the following means A to B. Conventionally, it has been possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns (performance identification information) in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-131876, and pseudo-continuous patterns (specific There is a device that can execute a pseudo-continuous performance (specific performance) that includes temporarily stopping (performance identification information) and re-variable display.

However, since no effect is performed when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, not only is it not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous pattern to temporarily stop, but also it is not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous pattern to temporarily stop. However, there is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the player's sense of excitement.

This invention was made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's sense of expectation and also increase a player's sense of exhilaration. .

The gaming machine of means A is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing the performance (performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature section 10SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of vibration performance and jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production and a line-of-sight guidance production, and a production period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a jackpot, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a loss. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance contents in a pseudo continuous performance. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for execution of a pseudo continuous performance), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification performance execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification performance period determination ratio. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of the change in the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of image data configuring display on an image display device in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of concentrated lines and effect images in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward a game area by a player's rotational operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this feature part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process allows the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance to be determined.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. In addition, the performance control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice performance control pattern are not limited to those that set separate performance control patterns, but one performance control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each performance. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 10-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the performance mode by an arbitrary performance device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Further, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, and from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 10-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is in a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD102 in which the reach performance of normal reach becomes a reach development that transitions to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

Setting suggestion effects include not only changing effects that can change the display color of the reach symbols, but also suggesting the expected level of jackpot through arbitrary effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and look-ahead preview effects, as well as setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic part 10SH)
Next, the characteristic part 10SH of this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes an operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a line-of-sight guide performance execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guide performance for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to control the production control CPU 120 at any one of timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols starts, timing T2 when reach is established, and normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at either timing T3 when the reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may press the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and timing T4. It is possible to perform a vibration performance in a manner in which the vibration time and the luminous color are the same.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance performance at the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the gaze guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance while the line-of-sight guidance performance is being performed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance different from the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance when a super reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various performance images.

The display of the line-of-sight guiding effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image for the eye-guiding performance has a lower priority than a constant small pattern, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, and a decorative pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light by lighting the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to provide various vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs are built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, and produces game effects in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on/off lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the random numbers for effect that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random number for effect updating process is used.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance that is not linked to a preview performance. In the process of step 10SHS2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration production is to be executed and the execution pattern of the vibration production when executing the vibration production, using random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referenced in the lottery in step 10 SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is determined according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determined value to be compared with the random number value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect so that the vibration effects are different.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain performance A is, for example, (probability that performance A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result will be a "jackpot")/{(display result Probability that effect A will be executed when is a “jackpot”) × (probability that the display result will be a “jackpot”) + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a “jackpot”) x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "jackpot")]

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery in step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is set so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value when the display result becomes "jackpot". It is sufficient that the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration performance of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "jackpot" are stipulated.

(Contents of vibration performance and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses execution patterns SE1 to SE1 to Multiple types of vibration effects of SE10 can be performed.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it does not perform the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as vibration effects at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration performance at timing T2 when the reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment operates between timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, and timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. The vibration effect can be performed at any of the timings. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed, it does not execute the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect. Further, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration performance at timing T4 while the super reach performance is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be performed while the super reach effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to control whether the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing T1, the normal reach reach performance is being executed at timing T3, or the super reach reach performance is being executed. Regardless of whether it is the timing T4 of It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light emits red light. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light. It is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light. It is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow color light regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. It is possible to perform vibration effects. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is a "jackpot". will be notified definitively.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to draw attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is pushed. When a vibration effect in which the button 31B emits red light is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts than when executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. Highly reliable jackpot. In addition, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed than when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. , the reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the super reach effect will be used instead of the normal reach effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. It is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T4 during execution. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of normal reach is being executed, expectations are further increased for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. be able to.

Note that the jackpot reliability of the vibrating performance that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach performance. In addition, if it is possible to execute multiple types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach reach effect is being executed is , it is sufficient that the reliability is higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibrating effect that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach effect is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach effect. In addition, if it is possible to perform multiple types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the vibration effect jackpot that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the super reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of super reach reach performance.

According to such a configuration, a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being performed, or a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being performed, can be used as a chance-up performance. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. This will definitely notify you that the displayed result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, rather than at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibrating effect is not executed at the timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started, expectations for the vibrating effect to be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved can be further increased.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols progresses, expectations for the execution of the vibration effect can be changed in a complex manner.

Furthermore, the probability that a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light is sufficiently low compared to the probability that other types of vibration effects will be executed. By specifying this, it is possible to increase the interest when it is definitely announced that the display result will be a "jackpot".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chances of making the user recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result in step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed and the super reach reach performance in the current variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at any one of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, if the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guiding effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance performance is a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guide effect based on random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the ratio of determining the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance performance at the same rate regardless of the mode of the current vibration performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to perform eye-direction effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, when performing the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance performance is not performed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, after the display result of "missing" is displayed, a relief effect may be executed and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display has been derived and displayed and the current variable display has started, if the eye guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, There is a possibility that the previous variable display may give the misunderstanding that a relief effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the line-of-sight guiding effect is not performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, so it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

Furthermore, if the line-of-sight guide performance is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guide effect is not performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. .

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute other performances such as a reach performance, the mode of the performance to be executed, etc. (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various performances such as a preview performance will be performed and their mode are determined by lottery. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not a preview performance is performed and its mode by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the current display result, the current variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect specified by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 sets a timer value according to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the production control process timer, and also sets the type and mode of the production decided to be executed. The effect specifying data specifying the effect and the execution timing specifying timer value indicating the execution timing of the effect by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in a timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of performances determined to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores performance specifying data and an execution timing specifying timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start the variable display of the decorative symbols that derive the determined final stop symbol in the manner specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of decorative patterns. Note that at this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration effects and line-of-sight guide effects)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing and performance period of the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when a reach is established. In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

If the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the sight-line guidance performance 4 seconds before timing T3. , the vibration effect is started at timing T3. Similarly, in the case where the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guide effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T4 during execution of the super reach reach effect, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed 4 seconds before timing T4. The effect is started, and when the timing T4 comes, the vibration effect is started. The production period of the gaze guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams illustrating an example of the production operation of the vibration production and the eye-guiding production. In this performance operation example, an example will be described in which a vibration performance is executed at timing T4 while a super reach performance is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as a background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the super reach effect is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced size of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach effect was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. , and a "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established, are displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing a small pattern that becomes a notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing a confirmed small pattern that becomes a display result is displayed. derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns different from decorative patterns are variably displayed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the final decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small patterns is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small symbols disappear from the screen or are obstructed by obstacles. It will not be blocked by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK are also referred to as permanent small symbols or presentation small symbols. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of identifiable patterns are displayed in a display mode that is partially or completely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that shows numbers in the same way as a part that shows numbers in a decorative pattern. A performance image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a notification information image. Note that the small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is hidden. For example, after a variable display of a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, instead of a variable display of a decorative pattern, a variable display of a small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of the .

Note that a fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is, for example, repeated display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth symbol display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are connected to the display screen of the image display device 5 on the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1. is located at a remote location. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether variable display is in progress or not. Whether or not a display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, in this example, there is a pending display area 10SHH for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , is displayed. Note that when the super reach effect is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

Furthermore, a pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the pending number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the pending display area 10SHH, the pending number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in a specifiable manner. The display mode is that of arithmetic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guide effect four seconds before timing T4 during which the reach effect of super reach is being executed. The production control CPU 120 executes a production that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual production effect, for example, as a gaze guidance production.

In this example, the production control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B). do.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character makes an action of raising a hammer, as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-6(D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. 11-7(E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 controls the button image 10SHB when the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and generates a plurality of stars imitating the button image 10SHB at timing T4. The appearance of various images is changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS of the image is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the performance control CPU 120 starts the vibration performance at timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and causes the push button 31B to vibrate. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 ends the eye-guide performance, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the vibration performance and stops the vibration of the push button 31B when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance has elapsed, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1, for example. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and to check whether the push button 31B is vibrating or not, or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the On the other hand, by performing a line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set lower than that of the constant small symbol and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figure 11-7 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the small symbol always displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a lower priority than the regular small symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the pending number display displayed in the pending number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer that is in front of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6(B) to 11-7(G), a character image 10SHC and a button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the "mountain scenery" background image 10SHY. It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery".

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-reach decorative pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6(D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the eye-guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the eye guidance effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the pending display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the eye-guiding effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance can be made conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbols and the pending number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guide effect is being executed, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect and the display of the line-of-sight guide effect Also, small symbols and pending number display, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, it is possible to better ensure the visibility of the small design and the pending number display at all times, and to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance more noticeable. .

(Modified example of characteristic part 10SH)
The invention related to the characteristic part 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of whether or not to use the eye-guide effect may be set depending on which type of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration performance is a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. Depending on whether it is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits a red light, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color. The presence or absence of eye-guiding effects may be determined at different ratios. Here, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light, it is easy to execute the gaze guiding effect. In addition, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors, the eye guidance effect is always performed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance performance is executed, the execution rate of the vibration performance with higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance. In this case, there are multiple types of vibration performances that are linked to the preview performance, depending on the combination of the linked preview performance, the vibration duration of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the emitting color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 can execute an accessory preview effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance that is linked to a highly reliable accessory preview performance. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked accessory preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the accessory preview performance.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked with other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview effect, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after a determined decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination is derived, the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole. By doing so, a jackpot game state may be started. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration performance that is linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and is executed in the jackpot game state. Notify that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It may be definitely notified that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state is the highest number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the production control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance performance. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect only needs to have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed when displaying the error notification image.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It can improve your interest when playing. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is made longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. , it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to a certain timing as a reference, and may be made different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before timing T2, based on timing T2 when reach is achieved. , timing T3 when normal reach reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when super reach reach effect is being executed, which is a timing later than timing T2, is 3 seconds. The vibration time at a timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at a timing before the reference timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be different. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated at a first strength and times when it is vibrated at a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated at the second strength. When vibrating the push button 31B at the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated at the first strength. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability may be the same between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution pattern of the vibration performance and jackpot reliability that are respectively executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration performance may be performed as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities to perform vibration effects.

In addition to this, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-reading notice performance is in the first mode and in the second mode. , the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution that is the target of the pre-read notice may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance is such that it vibrates continuously for a predetermined period of time, and when it is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, To make jackpot reliability different in a variable display before execution that is a target of a look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance.

Alternatively, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance, the execution timing of the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance may be set to multiple times that can execute the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only one of the timings. For example, the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance can be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a pre-read notice can be executed, the vibration effect is executed as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It is possible to suitably recognize that the process has been executed.

When performing a vibration performance as a preview performance at a timing when a vibration performance is possible as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is currently being executed, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is currently being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance. For example, if it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a preview effect at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview preview performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display being executed may be set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined period of time, and the push button 31B in a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance The mode of vibration is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off over a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance as a preview performance can be executed at the timing when the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, either It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

If the execution pattern and jackpot reliability of the vibration effect are to be made common between the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the second model pachinko game machine 1 which is different from the first model, the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability are the same at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration effect, even if the mode of the vibration effect executed in the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed in the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, the jackpot will not be won. The reliability may be the same. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the light emission mode of the push button 31B in a specific effect executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect to be performed at that time, for example, if the eye-guide effect is not performed. For example, when executing a notification effect to notify that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is used to vibrate the push button 31B during a period in which the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guide performance is not performed, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the performance being executed at that time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same execution pattern and jackpot reliability, vibrations of the same execution pattern can be used. Regarding the performance, only the lower limit value of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when a vibration performance is executed as a performance to increase the chance of another performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other performance. While making adjustments, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executable at a timing different from timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, the production control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination, and then temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination. It is possible to perform an inciting performance that incites development into a reach mode. After the promotion effect is executed, there are cases in which the reach mode is developed with high reliability of jackpot, and cases where the display result becomes "miss" without developing into the reach mode with high reliability of jackpot. When developing into a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 executes a successful promotion performance that notifies the development to a ready-to-reach mode with high jackpot reliability as a result of the promotion performance. On the other hand, if the display result is "miss" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will not develop as a result of the promotion performance. Execute the inciting failure performance. In executing such an inciting effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the inciting success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful stimulation performance may be adjusted to match the image of the successful stimulation performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the inciting success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminescent color as the luminescent color. According to such a configuration, when a successful inciting performance is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be a "miss" even if the reach mode develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. It is possible to prevent it from increasing.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative symbol that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the interest at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to increase expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to prevent the vibration performance from being performed at other timings as well. It can improve your interest when playing.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the advantage to the player is Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple jackpot types with different numbers, the emitted color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid giving the misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage. It can be done.

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the jackpot type, an execution pattern in which the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance is "rainbow color" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration performance, it is possible to prevent a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that has a low advantage to the player, It is possible to prevent expectations for the vibration performance from being impaired.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using an auditory performance effect as a gaze guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when a vibration production is being performed, and then gradually increases the volume of that specific sound effect from a low volume to a high volume as a line-of-sight guidance production. Output as it changes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of a player who has difficulty recognizing the line-of-sight guide performance using visual performance effects to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

If the configuration is such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, it may be different from the first setting value and when the second setting value is different from the first setting value. The jackpot reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different depending on the time. For example, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern should be higher than when the setting value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is highly advantageous.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set depending on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emitted light color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the setting value is any one of "1" to "3", and when the setting value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect is It is sufficient if the vibration time and luminescent color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the high setting is likely to be the setting value "6" which is most advantageous for the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the set value is an even number, which may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player.

At timing T2 when reach is established, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to draw attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the manner in which the vibration effect is executed.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. If it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when reach is established. There may be times when In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at timing T1 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T2 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, it is possible not only to increase expectations for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T2 when reach is established, but also to further increase attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at timing T3 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 while the normal reach effect is being executed, the vibration effect causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible to not only increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed, but also to draw more attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T4. can be increased.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those shown in FIG. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot," the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous, but it definitely reports that the display result is a "jackpot." In the vibration effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vibration performance that definitively notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be always executed. According to such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means is suitably recognized, thereby suitably increasing the expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of the reach effect. be able to.

When performing a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, a timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed; The vibration effect may be made possible to be performed at any one of the timing T4 and the time when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is set so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of vibration effects that can be executed at timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at timing T4; limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When it is possible to perform a vibration performance that is linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance may be different from the mode of the vibration performance that is not linked to the preview performance. For example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to the accessory preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the accessory moves. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from that of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. According to such a configuration, when a vibration performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to a preview performance or not linked to a preview performance. .

It may also be possible to perform a present box effect. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer as shown in FIG. 11-6(B) may jump out of the opened present box, and a line-of-sight guiding effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, since the present box effect is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the line-of-sight guidance effect and the vibration effect.

When it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the push button 31B to be operated, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the manner in which the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect. For example, when lighting the push button 31B for a vibration effect, the control may be such that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for 3 seconds while the push button 31B vibrates, resulting in a lighting mode for the vibration effect. . On the other hand, when lighting the push button 31B in the operation performance, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting up) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds during the operation validity period. It may be controlled to have a lighting mode for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Note that during the valid lever operation period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to notify that the operation of the operation lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the valid lever operation period to provide a lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation.

For example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B etc. can be operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of music and background to be output, and display images. Settings related to effects, such as the brightness settings of the device 5 and the brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which production setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed depending on the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. You can do it like this. Further, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the settings related to the performance can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the settings regarding the performance can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while viewing a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, even if a vibration effect is performed, the player may not be able to recognize that the operating means is vibrating. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the interest through vibration effects.

Therefore, in order to attract attention to the gaming means before the vibration performance is executed and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature section 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). includes a push button 31B that can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.), and a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the performance control CPU 120 includes a push button 31B (e.g., the CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a vibrating effect in which the player vibrates), a line-of-sight guiding effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.), and the vibration effect execution means is , the vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started). , timing T2 when reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when normal reach reach effect is being executed, and timing when super reach reach effect is being executed. T4, etc.), the vibration effect can be performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform the following regardless of whether it is at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any one of timing T3 and timing T4). (first, it is possible to execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emitted light color are the same); For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the gaze-guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2, etc.). , the performance control CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operating means before the vibration performance is executed, and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance.

In the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature part 10SH, in the gaming machine of the means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line of sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control The CPU 120 may be configured to be able to perform a vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 1 or 2, the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature part 10SH has a specific performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 , a super reach reach effect, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it is possible to perform a vibration effect while a super reach effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images). ), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information). may have a lower priority than a small symbol, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, a decorative symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being performed, it is possible to suitably ensure the visibility of the predetermined information while making the visibility of the line-of-sight guide effect noticeable.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which the vibration performance execution means executes the vibration performance of the first aspect and the advantageous state than the first aspect. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 1.5 seconds and It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits white light, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit red light. When a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light than when a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, the vibration effect of the second aspect is more likely to be performed in a pachinko game). In machine 1, when the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted white light. At the same time, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is easier to perform, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect of the second aspect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows an example of the configuration of the effect device regarding the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator, for example.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestion performance suggesting that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect.

FIG. 12-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section performance pattern used to execute the operation section performance. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and purpose are set corresponding to each operating part performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that a super reach performance will be executed after a normal reach performance is executed (development of reach). The win/fail notification inciting time corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether or not the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 12-2(B) shows an example of settings when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the termination conditions, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery effect regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V-winning hole in the V-winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V-winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it is possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is caused by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. When a V winning prize occurs, the control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be brought to a game stop state by the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100 or the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 12-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 12-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. FIG. 12-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is established. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 when the reach develops. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach is developed. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance using a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a light emission mode that switches the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is controlled more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. As a result, the light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect than the light emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode continues for a period of time. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the SP reach A reach performance. The vibration pattern AKV44 has a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes rainbow-colored as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 12-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white color. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 70% or more for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When executing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section performance pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emitting colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), luminous brightness, etc., can be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The pre-read preview performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 12-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern is used, a continuous performance pattern determination table is referred to according to the number of reserved memories, and a determined value that matches the random value is assigned according to the winning determination result. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is performed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed.

FIG. 12-5(B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that makes it possible to execute the pre-reading notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared in advance according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read preview setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a loss-winning super reach, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. Then, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance that is a pre-read preview performance based on the winning determination result that is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be changed. It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation section effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display in which the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance will be lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation section performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of the plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) corresponding to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the production control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in Figure 12-8(A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command. Contains control data used to control the The operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control contents of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display production process in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It composes performance control execution data #1 to performance control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of performance control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, for example. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration control data of the operation section presentation control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section presentation, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 12-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and are timings at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation unit performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times can be executed. is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the target change is started, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the target change can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part according to the operation part performance pattern according to the remaining number of times is used in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 12-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when a reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when a win/fail notification is triggered. The timing is feasible for each. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach has developed. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when either the operation section performance pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Can be done. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is when the success/failure notification is triggered.

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 12-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 12-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light becomes white in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 300 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 12-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 12-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuations. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 12-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, red-purple, blue-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light-emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, for example, the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emission time, color, and light emission can be specified according to each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 12-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 12-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 12-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIGS. 12-13 show an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 12-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 12-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 12-13(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern is AKC12. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIG. 12-14 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. This includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIG. 12-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIG. 12-15 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 12-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 12-15 (C), the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the performance at the time of reach development, and the light emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. As for the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 has a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. There are cases in which the vibration modes of the two are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include those that execute a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31, such as the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance There are cases in which the vibration modes of the two are different. Further, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is activated have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the stick controller 31A is different due to the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the light emission mode of the light emission effect being different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation unit effects based on the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be changed. Appropriate diversification can improve gaming interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. Appropriate diversification can improve gaming interest.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is executed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. For example, the reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 is a lottery performance of the jackpot type according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach effect of SP Reach A in that the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the player can undoubtedly recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration performance by the operation part performance is executed than if the specific performance is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the reliability of the jackpot is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIGS. 12-16 show an example of performing an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 has a white display color, causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section performance according to any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration performance.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When an operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to such a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, the light emission can be made different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 12-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitted from the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the game's interest can be improved. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between an operation section presentation and a specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 12-18 to 12-20 show the case where SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach performance.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 12-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. The light may be emitted in a light emitting pattern in which the emitted light color and emitted light brightness gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect with a vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, in the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17, Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be executed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of the effect images such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N will emit light in gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to perform the entire music playback in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In conjunction with the output of the sound that plays music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance with vibration pattern AKV43, a change in the luminous color from blue to red, and It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the voices of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 12-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21(A), during the period AKZ03 during which the specific interlocking effect can be executed as the music is played, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sound corresponding to the musical scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 12-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 12-21 (C). It includes a vibration effect, which is a vibration effect, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 12-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 12-21(B), the specific light emission effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and need only be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the ``R'' scale, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performance and improve the interest in the game.

The reach performance of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking performance, it is possible to execute a special vibration performance using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display and By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 12-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform a special vibration effect in conjunction with the notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby improving the interest in the game. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with the special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance are different in light emitting manner such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation section performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is common when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the effects using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are performed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is the operation part performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation part performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming inferior. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern is AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to be in any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to be a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of times the player is opened, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a specific effect may occur during some or all of the effect periods. It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary presentation state, an operation part presentation or a specific interlocking presentation may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation section production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Moreover, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, there will be no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers); When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

Also, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a random number of losing symbols is used in the drawing of a time-saving symbol, the winning value will be a specific random number of losing symbols, and if a random number of jackpot symbols is used in the lottery of time-saving symbols, a specific number will be used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random values are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the setting, so this is only possible if the setting values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, even if the time-saving number is reset or the lottery is not selected, it is only necessary to decide for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

Furthermore, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may differ depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is set when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a specified number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance is executed to notify whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to be advantageous may be common as long as the jackpot reliability is 100%, for example. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when a notification performance is executed to notify whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to be advantageous may be common as long as the jackpot reliability is 100%, for example. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect depending on the timing.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance upon notification of being controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification of being controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission performance may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the game's interest.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different as long as it is, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 of starting the target variation.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect depending on the timing.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Furthermore, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols), derive and display the display results, A game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes operating means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player. ), and the vibration effects in which the operating means vibrates include predetermined vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern) and special vibration effects (for example, vibrations included in the variable display effect control pattern). Vibration performance execution means (such as driving the vibration motor 131 based on the control data) (for example, the variable display performance control pattern in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) (e.g. CPU 120 for effect control that executes effect processing during display), and a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 according to the emission color included in the operation section effect pattern). etc.) (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203); Specific performance execution means (for example, based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game and a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance processing in step S172), the advantageous state is achieved when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not performed. (e.g., jackpot reliability according to the operation part performance pattern, etc.), and depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed. , the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is different (for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the luminous color included in the operation part performance pattern and the application of the operation part performance pattern, etc.), and the vibration performance execution means executes the specific performance. Accordingly, the special vibration performance can be executed (for example, the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance (for example, the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 are different from each other). different vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, etc.),
moreover,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing the performance (performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. The area where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines are examples.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, the player's expectation for the temporary stop can be increased by the suggestive effect, and the exhilaration of the player for the temporary stop can be increased by the execution of the notification effect. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.
The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) Machine 1) includes an operating means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined vibration effect (for example, included in the operation section effect pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. Vibration effect execution means (for example, in step AKS203) capable of executing special vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the determined operation part performance control pattern and variable display performance control pattern, and a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172, A light emitting effect execution means that can execute a light emitting effect (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the light emitting color included in the operation effect effect pattern) (for example, a light emitting effect execution means of the operation effect effect control pattern determined in step AKS203). A performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using lamp control data), and a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. ) (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance processing in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203), When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.) than when the vibration presentation is not executed, and the predetermined The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, depending on the light emission color included in the operation area effect pattern and the operation unit jackpot reliability depending on the use of the performance pattern), the vibration performance execution means is capable of executing the special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, execution of the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance have different vibration modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. Examples include areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In other words, attention will be paid to the light emitting mode that has a high rate of controlling a predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether or not it is executed at the execution timing of the vibration effect, and whether or not a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect. In addition, even if the special identification information does not temporarily stop, the effect display will continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing, so the effect display can be improved. The lingering sound can strongly impress the player with the suggestive performance, and the player's sense of disappointment can be alleviated compared to the case where the effect display ends immediately after a predetermined timing has passed. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, easily attracts players' interest and improves the interest of the performance.

Further, the specific performance and the vibration performance may be associated with each other. For example, the execution ratio of the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance may be varied depending on the type of specific performance to be performed and the number of temporary stops. By doing so, it is possible to attract attention to both the specific performance and the vibration performance, and to create a sense of expectation for an advantageous situation, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that derives and displays results and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing the performance (performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 ) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 ) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. The area where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines are examples.

Furthermore, a gaming machine (for example, A pachinko game machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)
FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 13(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 13(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 13(A).

As shown in FIG. 13(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the variable special figure in the second special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 13(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 14, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving hit or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 15, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 193SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the feature section 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 193SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained.

Type 1 gaming machine is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing the performance (performance);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 ) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 ) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 15 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification) (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Type 3 gaming machine is
If the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive performance execution means includes a predetermined method for temporarily stopping the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-48 as modification example 193SG-1, the part where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5);
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1 or embodiment 2, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

Type 4 gaming machine is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, when the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the display image data Before the switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D1. (The part where the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the image data switching timing)
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the predetermined timing when the specific production identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, so that the specific production identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop. By making players aware of this, and by increasing attention to the background image that is easily visible through the effect display, the game can be improved even if the specific production identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped. It can alleviate people's feelings of disappointment.

Type 5 gaming machine is
The suggested effect execution means causes the effect display to be temporarily stopped at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops; Delete any performance identification information (or performance identification information) different from the specific performance identification information before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 16-44, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop) In the "Medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative pattern with a number other than "1", which is a jackpot combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, stops. ),
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the production identification information from being mistakenly recognized as a temporary stop.

Form 6 gaming machine is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(G) to 16-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is located at a production position (for example, the first production position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information). Equipped with an operable movable body (for example, second movable body 193SG033),
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the temporary stop can be further impressed on the player by the movement of the movable body and the modification of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

Type 7 gaming machine is
The movable body is
The first action (for example, movement from the evacuation position to the first presentation position shown in Figure 16-2) has a smaller area that overlaps with the specific presentation identification information (or the special identification information) than the first movement. It is possible to perform a second operation (for example, movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 16-2 to the second production position),
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-35(F), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect) ),
The gaming machine according to aspect 6, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body, and to impress upon the player that the temporary stop has been made.

Form 8 gaming machine is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
In the first operation, the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped). The part that lights up with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The gaming machine according to aspect 7, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, the presentation effect can be improved.

Type 9 gaming machine is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, Fig. 16-35 (F) and Fig. 16-35 (G) As shown in , the part in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retracted position before the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to embodiment 7 or embodiment 8, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will be deleted.

The game machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(G) to 16-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
A display corresponding to a specific performance (for example, a display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) indicating that the N+1st variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped. A display device corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 15),
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) capable of operating at a performance position (for example, a first performance position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific performance compatible display displayed by the specific performance compatible display means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 9, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
The light emitting unit emits light in a manner according to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it emits light in blue; when displaying "x3", it emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific effect display. (The part that lights up the second movable body LED193SG034 in green, and in red to display "x4"),
The gaming machine according to aspect 10, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive performance is executed, the special performance (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) (For example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 15) that can execute the special performance execution means,
Equipped with
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed with priority over the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed instead of a normal decorative pattern). (a portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below);
The special performance execution means executes, as the special performance, a first performance period (for example, FIG. 16- As shown in 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) at the predetermined timing because the temporary stop did not occur at the predetermined position. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the second performance period (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16-33, FIG. 16-35, and FIG. 16-44, a portion where a concentrated line is displayed while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop due to the special effect. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
The special performance executing means is configured to add, as the special performance, the second performance at a position different from the predetermined position to the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position. It is possible to execute an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a translucent state is displayed in duplicate at a position corresponding to a period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5). ),
The gaming machine according to aspect 12, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transition to the second performance period can be made even more natural.

The gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means can combine and display images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4, image data 1, image data 2, image a portion that can be displayed on the image display device 5 by combining data drawn as data 3 and image data 4),
The drawing layer in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer in which the effect display of the suggested effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 16-3 As shown in , a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggestive performance. ) and the degree of freedom in special effects can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed and then moved and erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (G) ) ~ As shown in Figures 16-35 (H), 16-36 (I), and 16-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed moving toward the player after it explodes with a crack. (the part that is hidden),
A specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", " It further comprises a specific effect compatible display means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 15) capable of displaying a specific effect (display such as "x4", etc.),
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-37, displaying "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) (the part that is moved and displayed toward the player and then hidden),
The production identification information in the N+1 variable display becomes visible from when the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until the display corresponding to the specific production is erased (for example, As shown in 16-37(O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 14, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the performance effects of the notification performance and the display corresponding to the specific performance can be enhanced, and the performance identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific performance is erased, so that the variable display can be restarted. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
A preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that foretells that the advantageous state is likely to occur using the performance identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIG. 15) part),
The preview performance execution means limits the execution of the preview performance when the display corresponding to the specific performance is deleted (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start number notification performance is " x2,” “x3,” and “x4” are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect);
16. The gaming machine according to aspect 15.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the user from not being able to easily recognize that the variable display will be resumed due to the execution of the preview effect.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
Both the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific production corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing the game (for example, if the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and the game starts (the part where the display moves towards the player side, and the part where displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move towards the player side),
The gaming machine according to Form 15 or Form 16, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast wave shown in Modification 193SG-4) A special effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a part for displaying a visibility inhibiting image such as an image,
The specific effect execution means makes visible the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see due to the special effect (for example, in Modification 193SG). -4, the part where re-variable display is performed after hiding the visibility-obscuring image),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 17, characterized in that:
According to this feature, before the display including the performance identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display starts, a special performance in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) becomes difficult to see is executed. It is possible to easily understand that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
image display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying variable display of the production identification information and production display of each production;
A board material provided on the player side of the image display means and having a transparency that allows the player to see the display of the image display means, and capable of displaying the special image by inputting light from the outer circumferential side. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification Example 193SG-4),
Equipped with
In the special performance, the special performance execution means makes the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a visibility inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 can be viewed from the player.) (parts that are difficult to see),
19. The gaming machine according to aspect 18.
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, it is possible to enhance the player's impression, and therefore it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the special performance.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
In the case where the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the same as the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing. Different from the movement speed of the performance identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in Figure 16-33, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the display image The movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of temporary stopping.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the speed of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined temporary stop position before the predetermined timing is as follows: The specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) that passed the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-5, Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward to the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing, and the (the part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-repeat pattern different when returning to the previous section),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 20, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the player can easily understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position or the movement back after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
The suggested effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position (for example, according to Modification Example 193SG). -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentrated line is not displayed again),
22. The gaming machine according to aspect 21.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand that the person is moving back after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops is the same as that of the specific production identification information after the temporary stop. The performance identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving speed (for example, as shown in FIG. However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or the movement after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The moving direction of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, , as shown in Figures 16-34 and 16-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player (towards the player). (the part that moves),
24. The gaming machine according to aspect 23.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it even easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of movement.

FIG. 16-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in this feature section 193SG. As shown in FIG. 16-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is equipped with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 is built in the second movable body 193SG033 to cause the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light. Note that the second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 16-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 during non-operation is placed at a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position) between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Incidentally, in the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this feature section 193SG is used as a jackpot notification during the variable display, during execution of the temporary stop notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, which will be described later, and during the reach effect of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 16-2. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Among these, when executing the temporary stop notification effect and when executing the first variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves the image display device 5 from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 16-2(B). While moving (operating) to the first performance position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach performance of Super Reach, the second movable body 193SG003 moves as shown in Figure 16-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second presentation position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and is located above the first presentation position.

Although not particularly illustrated, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first presentation position or the second presentation position is configured to return from the first presentation position or the second presentation position to the retreat position again in accordance with the passage of a predetermined period of time. It has become.

Furthermore, in this feature part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a part thereof overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern when viewed from the front. (See Figure 16-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the second performance position is limited to only when the jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first presentation position is also an operation in which the area overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern is larger than the movement from the retraction position to the second presentation position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the main characteristic section 193SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging and displaying the image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 16-3(A) to 16-3(D) and FIGS. 16-4(A) to 16-4(D), , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 16-3 shows the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 16-35) in the main feature section 193SG, and FIG. 16-4 shows the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), image data 1 displays a pseudo continuous pattern (this feature This data is drawn in order to display a temporary stop suggestion image that suggests that the symbol (in which the symbol "NEXT" is displayed) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

In addition, the pseudo-continuous pattern in this feature part 193SG is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative pattern. This is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo-continuous display) of a decorative pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern that is different from the decorative pattern and is a pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later. It may be.

Furthermore, in this feature section 193SG, a form in which the pseudo continuous pattern is a special pattern that is displayed as a part of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance has been exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display together with the normal decorative pattern even during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance.

Furthermore, if the pseudo continuous pattern is to be a different pattern from the decorative pattern, the normal decorative pattern (the pattern with the numbers "1" to "9" in the main characteristic part) is temporarily stopped in the center of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to a pseudo-continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B) and FIG. 16-4 (A), image data 2 includes the above-mentioned pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the top of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This data is drawn to display a moving display of , and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the data is drawn from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. This data is drawn in order to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 193SG).

In addition, the image data 2 displays a swinging display of decorative symbols in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion production is executed, and also displays the non-operation of the temporary stop suggestion production. At the time of execution, it is also image data that displays a variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 16-4(B), the image data 3 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 16-3 (C) and 16-4 (C), the image data 4 is transmitted from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display This is data drawn to display concentrated lines toward area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Although not particularly illustrated, the image data in the feature section 193SG includes, in addition to image data 1 to image data 4, image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in this feature section 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the image based on image data 2 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the top to the bottom) is changed to image data 4, as shown in Figure 16-3 (D). The image based on image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image based on image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern to The image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4 (the saturated line), and the image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4. The image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4 are displayed with priority.

Note that the concentrated line in the main characteristic portion 193SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 (C) and 16-4 (D), while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being executed, the player can pass through the concentrated line through the decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols, temporary stop suggestion The image can be viewed.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop. In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is executed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33) of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIG. 16-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped (FIG. 16-4) shown in FIG. 16-4.

FIG. 16-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command used in the feature section 193SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 16-5(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 16-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-5 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) and a small hit as a winning determination result. It is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 16-5(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or some of these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 16-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 16-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 16-7(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 193SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 16-7(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 16-8(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature section 193SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 193SG using FIG. 16-8(B), in this feature section 193SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in the feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 16-9). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 193SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-8(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16-8 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 16-9 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 193SG. In this characteristic part 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 193SG provides two types of normal reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. It is also possible to use only the types. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 16-9, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 193SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation patterns in this feature section 193SG include a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and variable displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, regarding the super reach variation patterns in the feature section 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the feature section 193SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 16-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-10, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the corresponding Jackpot Variation Pattern Judgment Table B. (variation pattern), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 3-time jackpot) ).

As shown in FIG. 16-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, if we pay attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability variable jackpot B, there are more pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to implement. Therefore, this feature section 193SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the variation pattern judgment table for special winnings, and change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is performed using the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. It is determined from PA2-1 (a time-saving shortening variation pattern that is out of reach) and PA2-1 (a variation pattern that is out of normal reach).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling effect operations, such as the area shown in FIG. 16-11(A) for holding data for effect control. Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 16-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 193SG191, a production control timer setting section 193SG192, a production control counter setting section 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 193SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 193SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section 193SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 193SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 193SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 16-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of the feature section 193SG, there is information indicating whether or not the display pattern has not yet been determined in conjunction with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 13). In other words, due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the display pattern has not yet been determined because the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. A display undetermined flag indicating , and a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, respectively corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with a buffer number.

In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this feature section 193SG has a storage area so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the production restriction flag means that in the command analysis process (Figure 16-18), a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, but the symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and number of pending memories are This is a flag indicating that the entry is not a target of a pre-read preview performance when a notification command is not received within a first pending storage number notification waiting time or a second pending storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 16-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 193SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 5 will be explained based on FIG. 16-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (Step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (Step 193SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 of , and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage section.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 193SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 193 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 16-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 16-13 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIG. 16-15) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 193 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 16-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section, etc., and determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 193SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 16-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 16-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 16-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 16-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 193SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission settings of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, are executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or not (step 193SGS128). 193SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 193SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , a failure variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but among these failure variation pattern determination tables A to C, failure variation pattern determination table A is For example, 498 (approximately 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take, and the variation pattern for failure is In determination table B, 598 (approximately 60%) determination values from 0 to 597 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 (approximately 70%) determination values from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 100 (approximately 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 are selected from the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. is assigned.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 193SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 16-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS135), and step Proceed to 193SGS138.

Further, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B (Step 193SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is Probable Variable Jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (Step 193SGS137) and proceeds to Step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 16-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 193SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 16-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 16-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability). , In the process of step 193 SGS 150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-8(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each of the jackpot types "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is set, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 193SGS155). Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 16-7 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small win" (step 193 SGS 150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. If the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result should be a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and whether to control to the small winning gaming state (whether the small winning flag is turned on or not). A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not the jackpot is played or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 193SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 193SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small win", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small prize symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 193SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 16-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probable variable jackpot C", that is, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "non-probable variable jackpot B", If it is either "probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), jackpot variation pattern determination table A or jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select and set the jackpot type to determine whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B. ”, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special winning variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination at step 193SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to a probability variable state or a time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used to determine one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172). ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. and set (step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. The error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the error pattern (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern stored in a random number buffer for variation, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193 SGS 175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 193SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 16-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is also turned on. It is determined whether or not there is one (step 193 SGS 183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, settings are made to the production control board 12 to transmit a winning start 5 designation command corresponding to the small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small winning display time is set in the small winning display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Further, the number of openings (for example, two times) is set in the number of openings counter for the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182; Y) and the probability variable flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 193SGS182; Y). 193SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probable variable jackpot A), hit start 2 specified command (probable variable jackpot B), and hit start 3 specified command (probable variable jackpot C) depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. ), settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 193 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 193SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time saving number of times remains and is in a high base state, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 193SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 193SGS195), the process advances to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

16-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is probability variable jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process advances to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIGS. 16-18 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 16-18, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS237; Y), the display undetermined flag of the entry in which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is ended.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 193SGS222). When it is the first starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 193SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS224). When it is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), a second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). If it is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is turned on (step 193SGS232).

If the received command at step 193SGS226 is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the received command at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or at step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS235; Y), the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

FIGS. 16-19 are part of a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of a prefetched preview performance and the performance pattern of the prefetched preview performance (the display pattern of the reserved memory display) in the prefetched preview setting process (S161); Next, a pending display update process is performed to update the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the storage content of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 16-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 16-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined based on whether the value of the production control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process advances to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS240b). In addition, the first variable display start number notification effect is the start of the variable display again as a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in Figure 16-29 (E), Figure 16-30 (L), and Figure 16-31 (S). This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the display is displayed. Further, in step 193SGS240a, it may be determined whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step By proceeding to 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the pending display flag, as will be described later. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect, the pre-read preview effect is not executed.

In step 193SGS241, the production control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winnings, depending on whether there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242) .

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is ended, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , Determine whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation command or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is the symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is , is set in the pending display flag. In other words, the pre-read preview performance is not executed for the pending memory that will result in a probability variable jackpot C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (any of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or non-probable variable jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting section, and the jackpot type specified in step 193SGS244, the pre-read notice at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is generated. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16-21(A), the presence or absence of a pre-read preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area 193SG5U. If the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or in the second pending memory display area 193SG5D. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than guaranteed variable jackpot C, the pre-read preview effect will not be determined to be non-executable, and the pre-read preview effect will always be decided to be executed and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (notice type) is determined.

Also, as shown in Figure 16-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", the proportion of display patterns β determined as display patterns (notice types) is determined by display pattern α. The percentage is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" or "non-probable variable jackpot", the proportion at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The percentage of probability-variable jackpots A increases, and the player's expectations for the probability-variable jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability-variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the advance notice performance. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β that is displayed in a white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is likely to be a variable jackpot C. Even if it is a "jackpot" other than the above, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect, as in the case where the variable display result is a "miss".

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting section, for example, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, the outlier (not shown) is selected. By referring to the pre-read preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 16-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area 193SG5U.

As shown in Figure 16-21 (B), if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than when the is ``non-reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to the highest value, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest value.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-21 (A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview performance is not determined to be non-executable (no preview performance), and the pre-read preview performance The rate at which the preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is that the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any variable pattern category is determined when the variable display result is “miss”. The percentage is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot (Probability Variable A)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which the display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probable variable jackpot A". Since the percentage becomes higher, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 193SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS249).

After executing step 193SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending memory display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, in step 193SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 193SGS250) and proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, after executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undetermined flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the starting prize-winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is The pending display of the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the first special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the pending display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will change according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. For example, one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the pending memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this feature section 193SG) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the pending memory.

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U are also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and It will now be displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U.

Note that in this feature section 193SG, a mode is illustrated in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 193SG5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 193SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning is performed in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 193SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 16-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing Step 193SGS272 or Step 193SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (Step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. A combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned chance (lost symbols) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview effect determination process for variable display that executes a pseudo continuous effect (for when pseudo continuous effect is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview effect during the variable display and the preview effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to perform a special temporary stop notification performance instead of the temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification performance is a performance that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous performance. , the special temporary stop notification effect means that, in addition to outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative pattern has been temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first time, the second special background image if it is the second time, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third time). This is a performance that informs the player.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). When it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193 SGS 283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview effect determination process for a variable display that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect is executed, and during variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview effect and the preview effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in any one of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 193SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 193SGS289). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data and starts the next process again. The variable display of decorative patterns is executed by starting a timer and controlling the presentation device according to the following process data so that there is no next process data. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is possible to execute the preview performance execution process for executing the preview performance in the variable display performance process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. First, as shown in Figure 16-23 (A), if the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during variable display, first, after reaching reach, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. A suggested temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic part 193SG is that after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a performance in which variable display is performed at a slower speed than usual. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A arrives, and the temporary stop notification performance period of the pseudo-continuous pattern is The stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. In addition, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of the series of symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 16-23 (A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B are at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance has a performance period of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is set to always end at a specific timing, regardless of which time is set.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect includes outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also outputs an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable displays to the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first, character A is output). This is an effect that notifies the player that the re-variable display of decorative symbols will be executed by displaying an image of character B for the second time, and an image of character C for the third time.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first variable display start count notification effect displays the variable display count of the decorative pattern, including the re-variable display count, on the image display device 5, and displays effect images of colors corresponding to the variable display count at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a performance that displays. In other words, the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display displays "x2" on the image display device 5, and displays blue effect images at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display displays "x3" on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start number notification effect, which corresponds to the third re-variable display, displays "x4" on the image display device 5, and a red color is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification performance ends, a second variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification performance. The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance that displays the variable display number of decorative symbols including the re-variable display number on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance.

After the second variable display start number informing effect is completed, the reach becomes again, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the normal reach effect is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 16-23 (B), if it has been decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, Similarly to the case where the variation pattern shown in Figure 16-23 (A) is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during a variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a first pseudo continuous effect are performed after reaching reach, respectively. Temporary stop and re-variable display of the symbol, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start count notification performance, second variable display start count notification performance, and first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again and the second pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start number notification performance, second variable display start number notification performance are executed. be done. Then, after the second variable display start number notification performance is completed, the reach is reached again, and the temporary stop suggestion performance is executed. At this time, the super reach effect is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, if the first temporary stop notification performance is performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance is also performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x3" (in the second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second first variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 16-25, if it has been decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect is performed after becoming a reach, and a pseudo continuous pattern is executed up to the second time. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start number notification performance, and second variable display start number notification performance are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification performance is finished, the reach is reached again, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, A first variable display start number notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect, and a super reach effect are executed.

In addition, if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the second variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x4" (in the third second variable display start number notification performance, "x4" of a smaller size than the third first variable display start number notification performance) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 16-26, if it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect is first executed. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in this variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. . In other words, in the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are The performance period remains unchanged.

After the special temporary stop notification performance ends, the first re-variable display of decorative symbols is performed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the display of "x2" of a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect. ” will only be displayed.

After the first temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern, special temporary stop notification effect, and second variable display start notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and variable display of the decorative pattern, special After the temporary stop notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are executed, a super reach performance is further performed.

Furthermore, as the second variable display start number notification effect, a smaller size "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 16-23(B), which is smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect. is executed.

As shown in FIG. 16-27, if execution of the special temporary stop notification effect has been decided and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion performance, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification performance, and the second variable display start number notification performance, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern is executed. A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and a super reach effect is also executed.

Note that as the third variable display start number notification effect, a "x4" smaller in size than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 16-23(B). is executed.

Although some of the details have been described above, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature section 193SG is a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop notification sound is emitted from the speaker 8L from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. This is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting from , 8R, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect refers to the temporary stop notification sound being output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as well as the number of times the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped, starting from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating the background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third) This is a performance that informs the players. Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as a special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display; The sound output period (special temporary stop notification performance period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification performance.

The re-variable display notification effect means that in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image display device 5 displays an image of the character according to the number of re-variable displays (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, the character This is an effect that notifies the player that the variable display of decorative symbols will be executed again by displaying the image of character A, the image of character B if the second time, and the image of character C if the third time. Note that the performance period of the re-variable display notification performance (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is executed. seconds. As mentioned above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop/re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation level is set. Regarding the display notification performance, the expectation of a jackpot is set highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest expectation of jackpot is when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is a process for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during the first variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is a performance, and the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start count notification performance, the second first variable display This is an effect that displays "x3" in the start count notification effect and "x4" in the first variable display start count notification effect for the third time as well. Incidentally, the performance period of these first variable display start number notification performances is one second regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance for notifying the number of times variable display of decorative symbols including re-variable display has been started during the first variable display after the first variable display start number notification performance. , the number of times variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and "x2" in the second first variable display start number notification effect) This is a performance that displays "x3" in the performance and "x4" in the first variable display start number notification performance for the third time) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance. Incidentally, the performance period of these second variable display start number notification performances is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

FIG. 16-29(A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous performance) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 16-22. In the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous performance), the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of a preview performance is extracted, and a pseudo continuous performance is determined using the random number value and a table for determining the preview performance (not shown). The performance is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-29 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 20%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in preview effect and the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

Note that the cut-in preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 16-29 (F), and the group preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 16-29 (G). As shown, a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The expectation level of a jackpot is set higher than when only a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed, and the expectation level of a jackpot is set highest when both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed as a preview performance (pseudo continuous). Jackpot expectation regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the performance: cut-in preview performance + group preview performance > group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (determined to execute at least one of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS303; N), the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-sequential performance) is ended, and if execution of any preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined preview performance, sets a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance, and ends the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 16-32, the executable period of these preview performances overlaps with the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start number notification performance period. In particular, if it is decided to execute both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance as a preview performance, these cut-in preview performances and group preview performance will be performed during the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start number notification performance period. The production is executed in duplicate.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if execution of any of the preview performances is determined in the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance), the same preview performance is executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods. (See Figures 16-29 to 16-31).

FIG. 16-30(A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 16-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of a preview performance is extracted, and the random number value and a table for determining a preview performance (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the preview performance will be executed in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not executed, and the notice to be executed. The performance is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-30 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 30%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case where only one is executed (jackpot expectation level regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance determination process (for when the pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is terminated, and if the execution of the preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS313; Y), The determined preview performance is stored, a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set, and the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is ended (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when performing a preview performance in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not performed, the preview performance may be performed in any period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 16-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification performance in step 193SG280 in FIG. 16-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 16-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the performance control CPU 120 controls the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) at a rate of 20%. Then, execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach off), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined. (non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when performing a special temporary stop notification effect in a variable display that performs a pseudo continuous effect (according to the temporary stop of a decorative pattern, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed) (Jackpot expectation level in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: Special temporary stop notification effect execution > Special temporary stop notification effect non-execution) .

In addition, as mentioned above, if we pay attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image Only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, but if the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 After the first special background image is displayed, a second special background image is displayed in place of the first special background image on the image display device 5 in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image (updated to the second special background image), and in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (updated from the second special background image). (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, regarding the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level is set, so the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 The expectation of a jackpot is set to be the highest when is the third special background image, and the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. (Jackpot expectation regarding the special background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image) ).

FIG. 16-31(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 16-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 16-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of . On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification performance period is determined to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification performance period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). In other words, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in a variable display that performs a pseudo continuous effect, if the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1 second. The jackpot expectation level is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (Jackpot expectation level regarding the performance period of the temporary stop notification performance when the special temporary stop notification performance is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance) :Temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds)>Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, in this feature section 193SG, a mode in which the temporary stop notification performance period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification performance period is It may be determined uniquely to one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Furthermore, although this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which the longer the temporary stop notification presentation period is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the short temporary stop notification presentation period, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher when the temporary stop notification performance period is shorter than when the temporary stop notification performance period is longer.

Next, the output mode of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 16-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are enabled to output BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Among these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period. The first variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification presentation period.

Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice performance sound and a group notice performance sound. Among these, the cut-in notice performance sound is output only during the cut-in notice performance execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice performance is decided, and the group notice performance sound is output when the execution of the group notice performance is decided. If there is, it will be output only during the group preview performance execution period.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 16-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is limited, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion production period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification production period, the speakers 8L and 8R output In addition to the first variable display start number notification sound, up to four types of sounds are output including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 16-33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the target is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. Note that from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern is not drawn as the image data 2. In other words, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed.

In addition, from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous pattern at the speed V1, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V1 to the display image data switching timing period, and is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

Immediately before the display image data switching timing, display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the center of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (speed 0) until the display image data switching timing, but from the display image data switching timing, it moves downward from the center of the image display device 5 at the above-mentioned speed V1. The moving display is performed at speed V3, which is faster than the above. Note that the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern moving at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 becomes non-display as the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. Note that the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the display image data switching timing, the saturated line is displayed again at the density D1 and then becomes hidden.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low).

In addition, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is improved by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1, compared to when the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2. becomes high (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the saturated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high) because the saturated lines are no longer displayed (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 16-34, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as shown in FIG. 16-33. They are the same. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification performance is executed, but during the execution period of the temporary stop notification performance, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. It will be hidden after that.

Furthermore, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a saturated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing using the image data 4. The display of the concentration line is such that the density of the concentration line (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern). , it will not be displayed from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line becomes hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low). In addition, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the display of concentrated lines has ended (it is not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 16-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops and the decorative pattern is created by drawing image data 1. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern. The temporary stop notification effect image of the decorative pattern is then switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 16-35). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature section 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher (visibility: medium) than during the temporary stop suggestion performance execution period because the concentrated lines are once hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area of No. 5, the left and right decorative patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern in image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo continuous pattern toward the player side (this side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is also increased by the drawing of image data 2. The moving display is executed. At this time, since the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed (enlarged display) in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo continuous patterns become invisible again.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops in the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed moving on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of decorative designs is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 193SG will be explained based on FIGS. 16-35 to 16-47.

First, if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 16-35 (A) to 16-35 (C). After the elapse of time, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom at the speed V1 in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is based on the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1 that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (D). It moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 and becomes non-display. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in Figure 16-35 (E). At this time, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (F) and 16-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The second movable body 193SG033 ceases to emit blue light while becoming invisible to the player. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (G) and 16-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retreat position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 16-36 (I) and 16-36 (J). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-37 (K) to 16-37 (P), the first variable display of the decorative symbols is started again. Further, an image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances are overlapped with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A group preview performance is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the blue effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits blue light.

Note that the "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figure 16-37 (O) and Figure 16-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect ends, the second movable body 193SG033 finishes emitting light in blue, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retreat position. Further, as the first second variable display start count notification effect, an image of "x2" having a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5.

After a while after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas will be displayed, as shown in Figures 16-38 (R) to 16-38 (T). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 that executes a pseudo-continuous performance only once or a normal reach jackpot variation pattern PB1-2, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (U), The pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect twice or more, then the display shown in FIG. 16-38 (V) As shown in , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-38 (W) and 16-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting green light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-38 (X) and 16-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which these multiple holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 16-39 (Z) and 16-39 (a), the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-40(b) to 16-40(h), the second variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Further, an image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second first variable display start notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the green effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits green light.

Note that the "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figure 16-40(f) and Figure 16-40(g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, a second variable display start number notification effect is displayed with "x3" in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, which is smaller in size than the first variable display start number notification effect. image is displayed.

After a while after the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas are displayed as shown in Figures 16-41(e) to 16-41(g). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is directed downward from the top in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is a super reach miss variation pattern PA2-3 in which pseudo-continuous performance is executed only twice or a super reach jackpot variation pattern PB1-3, as shown in Figure 16-41 (h). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect twice or more, then the display shown in FIG. 16-41 (i) As shown in , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-41(j) and 16-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, and the left and right decorative patterns are changed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-41(k) and 16-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retracted position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 16-42 (m) and 16-42 (n). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-43(o) to 16-43(u), the third variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, an image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are The display of the red effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits red light.

Note that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in an even larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See Figure 16-43(s) and Figure 16-43(t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" of a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. image is displayed.

Here, the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 16-44 (A) and 16-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous pattern is directed downward from above at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. At the same time, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position, the velocity V1 increases from the top to the bottom at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative pattern). A pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) that is different from the moving pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2) is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Ru.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops as shown in Figure 16-44 (C), and a temporary stop notification is sent to the surroundings of the pseudo continuous pattern. At the same time, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retreat position to the first production position is displayed in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops (pseudo continuous number) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits green light if it is temporarily stopped, and red if it is the third temporary stop. Further, at this time, the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern in the center of the image display device 5 is (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is now hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves directly below the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed. At the same time, a normal moving display of decorative symbols is executed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern starts moving at the speed V2 (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden from the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-44 (F) and 16-44 (G), after the saturated line is hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols will be displayed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed with the symbol, a reach effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative symbol indicating a jackpot or loss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the "medium" Decorative symbols with numbers other than "1", which is a winning combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, are stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the display of concentrated lines will continue even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line will continue to be displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot or miss combination (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect starts).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in Figure 16-45, the left and right decorative symbols ("right" and "left" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R) During the temporary stop suggestion production period, the displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility than before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion production (visibility: low) due to the concentrated lines being displayed at a density of D1. . In addition, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further reduced by changing the concentration line density D2 (visibility Gender: Medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern from the start timing of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). During the period, visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, during the remaining temporary stop notification performance period (on the player's side of the pseudo-series pattern) The display becomes invisible to the player during the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are created by partially overlapping displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. displayed at the center of the image display device 5, thereby creating a temporary stop notification effect. Visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed (moved and displayed toward the player) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they are no longer visible to the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display at the upper left of the image display device 5, resulting in the highest visibility state (visibility: high) becomes.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-36 to 16-37, FIGS. 16-39 to 16-40, and FIGS. 16-42 to 16-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and Although a form in which the execution period of the re-variable display notification performance is different (the re-variable display notification performance is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the stop notification performance and the execution period of the re-variable display notification performance may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-36 and 16-37, when the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes and moves toward the front on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, part of the pseudo-continuous pattern ( For example, the character "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the character as a re-variable display notification effect is displayed on the back side of a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern. start displaying the image. By doing this, the image of the character will gradually become visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbol, improving the performance effect, and furthermore, This makes it possible to transition between images without any discomfort.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (H) etc., as a temporary stop notification effect, an image in which the pseudo continuous pattern is cracked is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image itself explodes. Although the display mode is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying on the image display device 5 an image in which holes appear in the pseudo-continuous pattern, an image in which smoke and light are generated from these holes is displayed. Then, the image of smoke and light may make the pseudo continuous pattern difficult for the player to see, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. By doing so as well, it becomes possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without causing any discomfort.

Next, if it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 16-46 (A) to 16-46 (C), after a while after the variable display starts, It becomes a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion performance, a moving display of a pseudo-continuous pattern indicating execution of a pseudo-continuous pattern is executed at a slower speed (velocity V1) than usual in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-presentation period ends, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 16-46 (D) to 16-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is finished, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first The variable display of the decorative design starts again. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice performance or group notice performance is executed overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in performance and the group preview performance are finished, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed for the first time without executing the first variable display start number notification performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 16-47 (I) to 16-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern for the second time. At the same time as the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third time the decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed as the third special background image, as well as variable display of decorative patterns, cut-in preview performance, group preview performance, The third time the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, a reach effect is executed and decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-33 and 16-34, concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is created by the temporary stop suggestion performance. It is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the temporary stop. Then, as a temporary stop notification effect, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It can increase the feeling of elation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-44, in the case where the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is supposed to temporarily stop, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, and it also alleviates the player's sense of disappointment that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the game's interest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-33, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2 before the switching timing of the display image data. Since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 afterwards, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the saturated line after the display image data is switched, the player is made aware that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the saturated line. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feeling of disappointment that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped.

In addition, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the combination of decorative symbols that will result in a jackpot or miss in combination with the left and right decorative symbols in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed before it stops. Since the concentrated line is hidden, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the stop of the decorative pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (G) to 16-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first production position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern cracks and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern moves toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous pattern are By displaying the explosion, it is possible to further impress upon the player that the pseudo-continuous pattern has been temporarily stopped.

In particular, in this feature part 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first production position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern appear in front view. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo continuous pattern from becoming difficult for the player to see, and also notifies the player that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. can make an impression.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as an example of the pseudo-continuous pattern deforming, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of the pseudo-continuous pattern deforming, , the pseudo continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, circular or triangular), or the size of the pseudo continuous pattern may be different from before the temporary stop.

Further, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first production position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, if the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is moved to the first production position or a position different from the first production position, and when viewed from the front. It may be moved to a position overlapping with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-35 (F) and 16-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first production position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5 due to the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

In addition, in the variable display of this characteristic part 193SG, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous effect up to three times, and each time the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and the variable display is executed again as a pseudo continuous effect, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. in accordance with the re-variable display number of times as a one-variable display start number notification effect. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-37(O), when performing the first variable display start number notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so "x2", "x3", etc. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-37 (O), Figure 16-40 (f), and Figure 16-43 (s), when displaying "x2" as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable The number of times the first variable display starts is determined by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green to display "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red to display "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification performance, and the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when executing the first variable display start number notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", " Although a form in which a portion of the displays such as "x3" and "x4" overlap when viewed from the front is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect is illustrated. Sometimes, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap with the second movable body 193SG033.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-33, 16-35, and 16-44, as a temporary stop suggestion performance, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, and a concentrated line is displayed. This makes it easier for the performance control CPU 120 to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion performance, and when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (as shown in FIG. 16-3). This can prevent the switching from image data to the image data shown in FIG. 16-4 from becoming unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern moves downward from the center of the image display device 5, so the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the display image data switching timing in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more strange.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform image data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4. The data can be combined to display an image on the image display device 5. In particular, pseudo-continuous patterns that are temporarily stopped as images are drawn as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1. Concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect are drawn as image data 4 with the lowest display priority, so decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during moving display (during variable display), pseudo-continuous patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(H), 16-36(I), and 16-36(J), a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves toward the front, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed as shown in Figure 16-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially Display of "x2", etc.)) can enhance the production effect, and the decorative symbols on the left and right sides can be seen by the player during the first variable display start count notification production, so that the variable display can be performed again. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

In addition, the portions where the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move as shown in Figures 16-35 (H), Figures 16-36 (I), Figures 16-36 (J), etc., Figure 16-37 (O), The parts shown in Figure 16-37 (P) etc. in which the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed in a moving manner are all moving displays toward the player (enlarged display). ), the effects of the temporary stop notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance can be enhanced by these moving displays toward the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16-33, in the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at a speed of V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous pattern is V3, the player can determine whether the pseudo continuous pattern is before or after the temporary stop timing (before the display image data switching timing) depending on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern. This makes it easier for the player to understand whether it is later or not.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the moving speed of the pseudo-connection pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the pseudo-linking pattern after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player can determine whether the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. can be easily understood.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-34 and 16-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move from above to the bottom, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop are moved by the player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), it becomes easier for the player to understand whether it is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-sequenced pattern, and the movement display of the pseudo-sequenced pattern is Misidentification can be prevented.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, although the form in which the moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern is different before and after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous pattern is The moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern may be the same before and after the continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop, it does not have to be toward the player (towards the player). good.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, in the case where the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, an image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo linked pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed), and the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing. The period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the timing may be different. In other words, in this invention, "the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (pseudo consecutive symbols in this feature section 193SG is different") includes the fact that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols is different, and the number of display frames for displaying pseudo consecutive symbols is different. It also includes the period in which the symbols are displayed (the production period in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed).

Although the characteristic part 193SG of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the feature section 193SG, by displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). Although the embodiment has been exemplified to draw the player's attention to whether or not to temporarily stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 193SG-1, FIGS. As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous symbol will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the player can This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that the temporary stop was not made.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in FIG. In this case, a concentrated line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggestion effect. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in red. . By doing this, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect, so the effect The effect can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, a mode is exemplified in which a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance can be executed as a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed or changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It may also be possible to perform effects such as changing the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview performance, "x2" and "x" are used as the first variable display start number notification performance. 3" and "x4" are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the re-variable display will be performed due to the execution of the preview effect.

In addition, the feature section 193SG has a mode in which, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, variable display is executed again without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player on the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 is It is also possible to display a visibility inhibiting image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast wave, etc.), and then execute variable display again after the visibility inhibiting image is hidden. By doing so, the visibility inhibiting image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate, which is a transparent plate material and is capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility inhibiting image by injecting light from the outer circumferential side, is installed on the front side of the image display device 5 (the image display device) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 5 and the player). By doing so, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility-obstructing image is displayed on the light guide plate, thereby making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo-continuous symbols displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to enhance the impression and enhance the presentation effect of the visibility obstructing image.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, if the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved downward to the image display device 5 and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern is A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing, and the movement of the pseudo continuous pattern when returning to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 By making the speed different, the player can easily understand whether the pseudo-continuous pattern is before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after it has once passed through the center of the image display device 5. You may.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the display of concentrated lines may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo continuous symbol once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, pseudo continuous effects can be executed up to three times during variable display, and if pseudo continuous effects are executed three times during variable display, pseudo continuous effects can be executed twice. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the maximum number of times the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the variable display (in the case of this feature section 193SG) is shown as an example. 3 times) is executed, the reach effect will be different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the variable display result will have a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than other super reach reach effects). A high full-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be performed. In addition, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during variable display in this way, even if the full rotation reach effect is executed after the temporary stop notification effect without going through the re-variable display notification effect. good.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) while the symbols showing the same numerical value are stopped on the left and right decorative symbols (ready-to-reach state). Although the form of temporary stopping has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Furthermore, as described above, as a pseudo-continuous presentation, a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. In addition, regarding the form in which a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo continuous effect, combinations of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", "112" The decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped with a specific combination, such as a combination of so-called misaligned stitches such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 225SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a production image;
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means) A part that executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 15),
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
A pre-stage effect that moves and displays the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E));
The first subsequent stage performance is a success mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage stage performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(G) to 17-4(H), the pseudo-continuous pattern is (stopping part) and
A second later stage effect that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the first stage effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (F), the pseudo continuous pattern continues without temporary stopping) (the parts that are moved and hidden) and can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand whether the suggestive performance is successful or unsuccessful, and the interest of the suggestive performance can be improved.

Type 2 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed with priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (the part to be done) is to be done,
In the first latter stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to temporarily make the specific image difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (G) (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance is displayed)
In the second latter stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed) part),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By making it difficult to see when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort at the time of stop display, and to emphasize that the stop display has been made, thereby improving the interest of the subsequent performance.

Type 3 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
When the first subsequent stage effect is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily made difficult to see (for example, in the case shown in FIG. 17-6 As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter-stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-6(F), if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the temporary stop notification effect is not displayed) (parts where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display on the background side of a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. By making the image difficult to view when the image is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the image is stopped and displayed, and it is also possible to emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 4 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and an effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 17-7 (F) to 17-7 (H) as modification example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display is performed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the saturated line continues to be displayed even after being hidden by device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Even in the second stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby improving the interest of the second stage performance.

Type 5 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is given priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 17-8(F) to 17-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is the part where the saturated line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display on a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Also in the second subsequent stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the second stage performance.

Type 6 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent, highly transparent, and highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 17-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed as a decorative pattern or pseudo-connection). (The part that is displayed with priority over the design)
In the first latter-stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transmission effect display whose transparency is lower than the high-transmission effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 17-9 as modification example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, so that a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. parts that are difficult for players to see),
In the second latter-stage performance, the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification). is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is moving and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By displaying a low-transmission effect display when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort during the stopped display and to emphasize that the stopped display has been performed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 7 gaming machine is
The first subsequent performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the first stage performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. (If you do so, the pseudo-connection pattern after the temporary stop will be displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 6, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of a specific image that is displayed in a stopped state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a stopped state.

Form 8 gaming machine is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), (the part where the concentrated line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the display),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 7, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation that the specific image will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the first stage performance.

Type 9 gaming machine is
Equipped with a preview performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing a preview performance that foretells the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first latter stage performance and the second latter stage performance, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (for example, as modification 225SG-5, the image display device is used as a temporary stop notification performance) 5, when the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 8, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the preview performance from decreasing.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestive performance execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image whose left-right width dimension is L1 as a pseudo-coupled suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means to display the first stage effect and the first second stage effect, or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. A first suggestive effect that performs a second latter stage effect (for example, a pseudo connected suggestive effect shown in FIG. 17-11(C) as modification example 225SG-5), and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the second second stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestion performance (for example, the active display change suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 17-11 (D) to 17-11 (F) as modification example 225SG-5) that performs the second stage performance, and
When performing the first subsequent stage effect as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 17-11(B), the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance along with an image as a pseudo-response suggestion effect),
When executing the first subsequent stage effect as the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 17-11(D) to 17-11(F)). As shown in , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 9, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display size can be understood by the effect display. You can prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 17-1(A) to Figure 17-1(C), Figure 17-2(A) to Figure 17-2(C), Figure 17-3(A) to Figure 17-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 17-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 17-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 17-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 17-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 17-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 17-1(B), FIG. 17-2(B), and FIG. 17-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 17-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 17-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 17-3(B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 17-1 to 17-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 17-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated line in the main characteristic section 225SG has a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player cannot draw decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated line during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D), the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3. The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 17-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display in which the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed in the main feature section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 17-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(A) to 17-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-4 (G) and 17-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this characteristic part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although this invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The pseudo continuous pattern can be temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern will temporarily stop by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress. It is possible to increase expectations for the temporary stop, and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic part 225SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the feature section 225SG, as shown in FIG. 17-1, by drawing concentrated lines as image data 2 and drawing decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3, the image display device 5 Although a form in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns or pseudo-continuous patterns has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. 17-5(A) to 17-17. -5(C), by drawing saturated lines as image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-connected patterns with priority over saturated lines (concentrated lines are not displayed as decorative patterns or (displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo continuous pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 17-6(A) to 17-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (F), At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-6 (G) and 17-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to prevent the temporary stop from occurring. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 17-7(A) to 17-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentrated lines during the temporary stop suggestion production, and when the pseudo-continuation symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production. Regarding this, an example has been given in which concentrated lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 17-8(A) to 17-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, even if the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIGS. 17-9(A) to 17-9(C) as modification example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 17-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying concentrated lines with relatively high transmittance during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will make a temporary stop. You can improve your interest. When the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation (when the temporary stop notification presentation is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the effect image for notifying a temporary stop in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to notify that the pseudo continuous symbol has temporarily stopped through the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to a pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, it may be possible to perform a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 16-29 in the feature section 193SG) as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect. . It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview effect that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 17-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 17-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIG. 17-11(F). It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-coupling suggestion production as a preview production, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification along with an image as a pseudo-coupling suggestion production on the image display device 5, While once making the image as a pseudo-coupled suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing an active display change notice effect as a notice effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) with a shorter display size than the image for the pseudo-link suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect can be blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. This can prevent things from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation symbol as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image whose left and right width dimension is L1 is displayed as a continuous effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, the transmittance is not 0% at the top of the image display device 5 together with the image as the pseudo-connection suggestion effect (for example, the transmittance is An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 225SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 17-1(A) to Figure 17-1(C), Figure 17-2(A) to Figure 17-2(C), Figure 17-3(A) to Figure 17-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 17-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 17-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 17-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 17-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 17-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 17-1(B), FIG. 17-2(B), and FIG. 17-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 17-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 17-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 17-3(B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 17-1 to 17-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 17-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated line in the main characteristic section 225SG has a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player cannot draw decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated line during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D), the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3. The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 17-2(C) and 17-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 16-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 17-1 and 17-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 17-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display in which the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed in the main feature section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 17-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(A) to 17-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-4 (G) and 17-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this characteristic part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although this invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 17-4(C) to 17-4(E), concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The pseudo continuous pattern can be temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern will temporarily stop by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress. It is possible to increase expectations for the temporary stop, and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic part 225SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the feature section 225SG, as shown in FIG. 17-1, by drawing concentrated lines as image data 2 and drawing decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3, the image display device 5 Although a form in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns or pseudo-continuous patterns has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. 17-5(A) to 17-17. -5(C), by drawing saturated lines as image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-connected patterns with priority over saturated lines (concentrated lines are not displayed as decorative patterns or (displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo continuous pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 17-6(A) to 17-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (F), At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 17-6 (G) and 17-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to prevent the temporary stop from occurring. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 17-7(A) to 17-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentrated lines during the temporary stop suggestion production, and when the pseudo-continuation symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production. Regarding this, an example has been given in which concentrated lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 17-8(A) to 17-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, even if the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as shown in FIGS. 17-9(A) to 17-9(C) as modification example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 17-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize. Although not particularly shown in this modification example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as in other characteristic parts and modifications. The effect image for is not displayed.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying concentrated lines with relatively high transmittance during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will make a temporary stop. You can improve your interest. When the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation (when the temporary stop notification presentation is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the effect image for notifying a temporary stop in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to notify that the pseudo continuous symbol has temporarily stopped through the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to a pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As modification example 225SG-5, during the variable display, a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is used as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect (see Figure 16-29 in feature section 193SG) ) may be executable. It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview effect that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 17-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 17-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIG. 17-11(F). It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-coupling suggestion production as a preview production, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification along with an image as a pseudo-coupling suggestion production on the image display device 5, While once making the image as a pseudo-coupled suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing an active display change notice effect as a notice effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) with a shorter display size than the image for the pseudo-link suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect can be blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. This can prevent things from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation symbol as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image whose left and right width dimension is L1 is displayed as a continuous effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, the transmittance is not 0% at the top of the image display device 5 together with the image as the pseudo-connection suggestion effect (for example, the transmittance is An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the display mode such as the pending memory display at the end timing of the variable display, the display device 5 temporarily stops the symbol. The variable display result corresponding to the suspended memory display can be executed as a variable display result that suggests a jackpot, and can be displayed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , a case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the pending memory display changes (the pending memory display change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the pending memory display change notification pattern stops. It may also be possible to perform a performance equivalent to the performance (suggestive performance in the present invention).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although a mode in which a pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to a jackpot depending on the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the background image change is to be performed (background image change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion effect in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern stops. A corresponding effect (suggestion effect in this invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the feature section 193SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

Further, in this specification, a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are illustrated as examples of the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may also be implemented by combining these plurality of characteristic parts and modification examples. Alternatively, only one feature or modification may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic section 193SG or the characteristic section 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-continuous effect) that notifies that a pseudo-continuous performance will be executed may be used as one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although a mode in which the symbols (symbols) are temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A production corresponding to the temporary stop suggestion production in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG (suggestion production in the present invention) is executed for the stop of a pattern that is suggestible and that suggests that a specific setting value is set. It may be possible.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 5... Image display device 9... Game effect lamp 9B1... Lever lamp 9B2... Button lamp 9C... Upper frame lamp 9M... Left frame lamp 9N... Right frame lamp 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 31A... Stick Controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 120...CPU for performance control
131... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A production control means capable of executing production;
Predetermined effect execution means for performing variable display again after executing the predetermined effect after the start of variable display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the predetermined effect is to be executed;
comprising a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify that the predetermined effect has been executed,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in either a first light emission mode in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is low, and a second light emission mode in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is high, unlike the first light emission mode. and
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A specific performance can be executed after starting the reach performance,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined vibration production that vibrates,
It is possible to execute a special vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
At the first timing , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed according to a light emission mode of the light emission means ,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a performance movable body different from the operation means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different vibration modes,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different vibration modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images